ProMaster City
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 ProMaster City
15VM-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................91
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................143
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................195
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................287
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................327
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................381
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................387
10
INDEX .....................................................................397
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
RAM is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to
body modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
turer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains di-
mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
support. For service issues, contact your authorized
dealer.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
6 INTRODUCTION
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor-
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................12
▫ Locking Doors With A Key ...............14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................14
䡵 SENTRY KEY® .........................14
▫ Replacement Keys .....................15
▫ General Information ....................15
䡵
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .16
▫ Rearming Of The System .................16
▫ To Arm The System.....................16
▫ To Disarm The System ...................16
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........17
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ............17
▫ To Unlock The Doors....................18
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters........19
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........19
▫ General Information ....................20
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................20
▫ Locking The Doors From The Outside .......21
2
▫ Unlock The Doors From The Outside ........22
▫ Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside
The Vehicle ..........................22
▫ Sliding Side Doors......................22
▫ Child Lock System — If Equipped ..........23
▫ Auto Unlock Doors ....................24
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................25
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped ...........25
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................27
䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR ....................28
▫ Opening And Closing From Outside The
Vehicle ..............................28
▫ Opening And Closing From The Inside .......29
▫ Child Lock System .....................29
▫ Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device ..........29
䡵 DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS .............30
▫ Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From
The Outside ..........................30
▫ Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door
From The Inside .......................31
▫ Opening The Second Swing Door ...........31
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS SYSTEMS .........31
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............31
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................33
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........44
▫ Child Restraints .......................59
▫ Transporting Pets ......................84
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....84
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................85
▫ Transporting Passengers..................85
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................86
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................87
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ..........................89
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The Key Fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical
key, simply push the mechanical key release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized studio that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK.
2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
RKE Key Blade Released
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK and re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When hav-
ing the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring
all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The system provides both au-
dible and visible signals. Every intrusion attempt causes
three continuous alarm cycles. Every alarm cycle lasts 30
seconds. For 26 seconds, horn will sound, and the turn
signal lights will flash. For four seconds, it will pause.
After a maximum 10 alarm cycles, only the turn signal
lights will flash until the next alarm activation.
Rearming Of The System
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself after processing all the alarm
cycles related to the intrusion attempt. If the condition
which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will
ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
To Arm The System
To arm the system, The Vehicle Security Alarm will set
when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter to lock the doors. If a door or the hood is not properly
shut, the alarm system will exclude the related door from
protection.
To Disarm The System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door and disarm
the system.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To exit the alarming mode, push the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button and open the door.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
To Unlock The Doors
CARGO Vehicle
Push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE transmit-
ter to unlock the front two doors depending. Push and
release the CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE transmitter
to unlock the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors and
rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash to acknowl-
edge the unlock signal.
Passenger Vehicle
Push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE transmit-
ter to unlock all doors. Push and release the CARGO
UNLOCK button on RKE transmitter to unlock the cargo
doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal.
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
1 – Mechanical Key Release Button
2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button
3 – Lock Button
4 – Cargo Unlock Button
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing” for further information.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the
mechanical key to access the battery case screw lo-
cated on the side of the Key Fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob
using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
Key Fob Screw Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1.
A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the
battery is a minimum of three years with normal usage.
2.
Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be locked or unlocked from inside the
vehicle by using the door handle.
• To lock the doors, push down on the door handle.
• To unlock the doors, pull up on the door handle.
Power Door Locks
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking The Doors From The Outside
Locking with an RKE transmitter
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Locking with the RKE key blade
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button (item #1 shown
above) to expose the RKE key blade, insert the key blade
1 – Mechanical Key Release Button
2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button
3 – Lock Button
4 – Cargo Unlock Button
RKE Key Blade Released
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
into the doors exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
clockwise to lock the front door.
Unlock The Doors From The Outside
Unlocking with an RKE transmitter
On the Passenger Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK
button on RKE transmitter to unlock all doors. On the
Cargo Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on
RKE transmitter to unlock the front two doors. Push and
release the CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE transmitter
once to unlock the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors
and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal.
Unlocking with the RKE key blade
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button (item #1) to
expose the RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the
doors exterior lock cylinder and turn the key counter-
clockwise to unlock the front doors only.
Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The
Vehicle
Pull up on the lock/unlock lever located on the drivers
door panel to the 1st detent to unlock all doors from
inside the vehicle.
Sliding Side Doors
Unlocking with an RKE transmitter
Push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE transmit-
ter to unlock the sliding side doors, pull the handle out
from the bottom, then slide the door towards the rear of
the vehicle until it locks into place and cannot go any
further. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Unlocking with the RKE key blade
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button to expose the
RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver
exterior door lock cylinder and turn the key counter-
clockwise to unlock all doors.
Closing and locking from outside
Grab the side door handle and push towards the front of
the vehicle. Once the side door is secured in the full
closed position, reverse either of the unlocking modes
above to lock the sliding side doors.
Child Lock System — If Equipped
This system prevents the sliding side doors being opened
from the inside.
It can be engaged only with the sliding side door open:
Child Lock System
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door
Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
The device remains engaged even if the doors are un-
locked remotely.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
Auto Unlock Doors
This feature unlocks all doors when the driver door is
open.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three minutes after
the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
The window opening mechanism is fitted with a security
system (if equipped) that can detect the presence of an
obstacle whilst the window is closing; when this hap-
pens, the system activates and the movement of the glass
is immediately reversed.
If the presence of an object is detected and the system is
activated, it may be necessary to perform the reset
procedure by fully opening the windows.
Power Window Switch Panel
1 – Rear Window Control Buttons – If Equipped
2 – Driver Passenger Window Control Buttons
3 – Passenger(s) Window Lock Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Auto-Down Feature
The front window switches are equipped with an Auto-
Down feature. Push the window switch for a short period
of time, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE: The power window switches remain active for up
to three minutes (depending on the accessory delay
setting) after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Auto-Up Feature
Lift the window switch to the second detent for half a
second, release, and the window will go up automati-
cally.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent for less than half a second and release it
when you want the window to stop.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Power Windows System Initialization
The power windows may be reset if any of the following
occurs:
• On the front doors
• Fuse or battery are disconnected
• On the rear doors
• Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window
is moving
• 50 window movements without ever closing the
window
• One door opening movement with the window
moving, without ever closing the door
Proceed as follows for initialization:
1. Completely close the driver’s door window, keeping
the operating button pushed for at least five seconds
after the (upper) end of travel position.
2. Proceed in the same way on the passenger’s side door
button and on the buttons of rear doors.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open posi-
tions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.
If the buffeting occurs open the front windows together
to minimize the buffeting.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
On Cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted with a
spring-loaded latch that stops the door from opening any
further. To lock it, simply push the door as far as it will
go; to unlock it, pull forward firmly.
Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle
Opening/Unlocking with an RKE transmitter
In the Passenger Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK
button on RKE transmitter to unlock all doors. In the
Cargo Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on
RKE transmitter to unlock the front two doors. Push and
release the CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE transmitter
once to unlock the passenger/cargo area (side lateral
sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Unlocking with the RKE key blade
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button to expose the
RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver door
exterior lock cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise
to unlock all doors.
Closing/Locking with an RKE transmitter
Push and release the LOCK button on RKE transmitter to
lock all doors. Push and release the CARGO LOCK
button on RKE transmitter once to lock the cargo area
(side lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Locking with the RKE key blade
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button to expose the
RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver door
exterior lock cylinder and turn the key clockwise to
unlock all doors.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Opening And Closing From The Inside
Opening:
Pull the interior door handle switch to unlock the door,
then pull the handle and slide the door towards the rear
of the vehicle until it can go no further.
Closing:
Pull the interior door handle switch to release the door
and then push it towards the front of the vehicle.
Child Lock System
This system prevents the sliding side doors being opened
from the inside.
It can be engaged only with the sliding side door open:
• Position 1 – engaged (door locked)
• Position 2 – disengaged (door can be opened from
inside)
The device remains engaged even if the doors are un-
locked remotely.
Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device
The sliding side doors are provided with a device for
locking all the doors using the lock in case of a power
fault.
The device can be engaged with the sliding side doors
open as follows:
• Position 1– device not engaged (doors released)
• Position 2 – device engaged (fit the metal insert of the
ignition key in its seat and rotate clockwise), door
locked
The device is released and thus the doors can be opened
as follows:
If the power is restored:
• By remote control.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• Opening a front door by inserting the key into the key
pawl.
If the power is not restored:
• Opening the driver side door by key pawl and the
other doors (passenger’s side and sliding side door)
pulling the inner handle.
If the child lock was engaged and the previously de-
scribed locking procedure was carried out, operating the
internal handle will not open the door but will only
realign the door lock knob. To open the door, the outside
handle must be pulled. The door central locking/
unlocking button is not disabled by the engagement of
the emergency lock.
DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS
The rear double swing doors are fitted with a link system
that stops them when they have opened to an angle of
approximately 90 degrees.
To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees, push the
locking device (one on each side) and simultaneously
open the doors.
Using the key pawl on the door, you can do the following:
•
For Cargo versions with swing door/cargo doors: cen-
trally unlock the load compartment (sliding side doors +
rear swing doors/tailgate), centrally lock all the doors.
• For versions with swing door: local unlocking/
locking.
Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From The
Outside
To open the door, turn the key in the lock or push the
cargo lock button on the remote control and then pull the
exterior handle to the left. To close the door, turn the key
in the lock or push the lock button on the Remote Keyless
(RKE) transmitter.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door
From The Inside
From inside the vehicle, use the interior door release
mechanism located on the left rear trim panel.
Opening The Second Swing Door
After having opened the first door, pull the handle
located on the door face toward the rear of the vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraints System (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door and you could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in
the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
outboard front seat belts are buckled.
In addition, when the ignition switch is first turned
ON/RUN, if the driver is unbelted during the first few
seconds the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and a
continuous chime signal will start and remain on until
the seat belt is buckled.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger seat belt is
unbuckled once the vehicle speed is over 12.5 mph
(20 km/h) or when travelling at a speed from 6 to
12.5 mph (10 to 20 km/h) for few seconds, the BeltAlert
warning sequence begins by blinking the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once
the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire dura-
tion or until the respective seatbelts are buckled. After the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light re-
mains illuminated until the respective seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s seat belt remains
unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6.
To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage —
Cargo Van
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Adjustable Anchorage Adjustable Anchorage
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
Commercial Vehicle
Passenger Vehicle
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag Locations
1 — Driver/Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts.
SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side
of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
Generic Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the generic warning
light will illuminate in flashing mode on the
instrument panel.
The Generic warning light will stay on in flashing mode
until the fault is cleared. If the generic warning light
comes on intermittently on while driving have an autho-
rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Generic Warning
light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–732–8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-
index-53.htm
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System (Passenger Vehicle)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations (Passenger Vehicle)
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor
to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be at-
tached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes Second row all positions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Locating LATCH Anchorages (Passenger Vehicle)
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages (Passenger Vehicle)
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Tether Anchorage Locations
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Center Seat LATCH:
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-
tion using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System”
for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To install a LATCH-compatible Child Restraint:
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt (Passenger Vehicle)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Passenger Vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes The head restraints may be re-
moved in the center seating posi-
tion only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage — Passenger Wagon Only:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Installing Child Restraints in Commercial Vehicles
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a
family vehicle and is not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat(s). Never install rearward-
facing child restraints in this vehicle. If you must carry a
child in a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger
seat should be moved to the full rearward position and
the child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight. Follow the instructions below to
secure the child restraint using the seat belt and tether
anchorage.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se-
cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger Air Bag. In a collision, a passenger Air Bag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt (Commercial Vehicle)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): Commercial
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage (Commercial Vehicle)
This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap anchorage
located behind the front passenger seatback, near the
floor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint,
always secure the top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether anchorage.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable head re-
straints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS .............................94
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped .....94
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................94
▫ Manual Folding Door Mirrors .............95
▫ Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If
Equipped ............................96
▫ Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped .......96
▫ Sun Visors ...........................97
䡵 SEATS ...............................98
▫ Manual Seat Adjustments.................98
▫ Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped ..........101
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............102
▫ Head Restraints ......................103
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........107
䡵 LIGHTS .............................110
▫ Multifunction Lever ....................110
▫ Headlights ..........................111
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....111
▫ High Beams..........................111
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................112
3
▫ Parking Lights .......................112
▫ Turn Signals .........................112
▫ Lane Change Assist ....................112
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .........112
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........113
▫ Map/Dome/Lights ....................113
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......114
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........114
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............117
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .117
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........118
▫ To Activate ..........................119
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................120
▫ To Deactivate ........................120
▫ To Resume Speed .....................120
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............120
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................122
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................122
▫ ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Sensors........123
▫ ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Alerts .........124
▫ ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Failure
Indications ..........................126
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System .............................126
▫ ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions ..........................127
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................128
䡵 POWER OUTLETS .....................131
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................134
䡵 CUPHOLDER .........................135
䡵 STORAGE ............................135
▫ Glove Compartment ...................135
▫ Dash Storage ........................136
▫ Overhead Console Storage ...............136
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................137
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs .................137
▫ Rear Cargo Lights .....................138
▫ Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped . . . .139
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............140
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped ......140
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .....141
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Manual Folding Door Mirrors
The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to be
folded rearward to help avoid damage.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
car wash or a narrow location.
Folding Mirrors
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If Equipped
From the inside of the vehicle, use the control lever to
adjust the mirror.
Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the mirror flag
trim above the driver’s door trim panel. To adjust a
mirror, turn the control knob toward the left or right
mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the
direction you want the mirror to move. When you are
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving a
mirror.
Manual Mirror Control Lever
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Your
vehicle may be equipped with courtesy mirror located on
the passenger sun visor.
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Driver Mirror Select Position
2 — Neutral Position
3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position
4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
“Slide-On-Rod” Of Sun Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Seat Adjustments
The front driver and passenger seats can be adjusted
forward and rearward and if equipped may be reclined
and the height and lumbar can be adjusted.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Seat Adjustments
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjusting Bar
2 — Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recliner Knob
4 — Lumbar Knob
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-
ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The height adjusting lever is located on the center
outboard side of the seat. Lift up or push down on the
front lever to adjust the front of the seat up or down.
Recliner Adjustment — If Equipped
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seatback, rotate the knob rearward without
leaning back. To return the seatback to its normal upright
position, lean forward, rotate the knob forward until the
seatback is in the upright position.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The lumbar control knob is
located on the rear upper outboard side of the seatback.
Rotate the control forward to increase and rearward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat),
and lift it upward until the seatback releases.
2. Slowly fold down the seatback.
3. Pull forward on the lower release lever located on the
lower outboard side of seat and lift the seat for
extended cargo space.
Seatback Release Lever
Seat Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
4. Reverse order for original setting.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the lower outboard side of the seat.
Push the button once to turn on the heated seats. The
LED on the button turns on when the heated seat is on.
Push the button a second time to shut the heating
elements off.
Extended Cargo Space
Heated Seat Control Button
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• This features is allowed only with ignition key at MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING! (Continued)
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, push the adjustment button,
located on the base of the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
then push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints can be removed by pushing
the release buttons, located at the base of the head
restraint and pull upward on the whole assembly.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
The center head restraint is adjustable and removable. To
raise the head restraint, push and hold the adjustment
button, located on the base of the head restraint and pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push and hold the adjustment button, and push down-
ward on the head restraint till the desired height is
reached.
To remove the head restraint, push the release button and
adjustment button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly and raise it as far as it can go. To reinstall the
headrest, put the headrest posts into the holes while
pushing the release button and adjustment button. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height.
Outboard Head Restraint Release Buttons
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
Center Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into the
opening beneath the center of the hood and push up
the safety latch lever to release it, before raising the
hood.
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in hood
slot to secure the hood in the open position.
Hood Release Lever Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in close
position before closing the hood. Damage may occur.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Prop Rod
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
high beams, parking lights, passing light and turn sig-
nals.
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Multifunction Lever
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up-
ward to the first detent for headlight operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE:
• The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on with
DRL. The DRL function may be programmed to be ON
or OFF through the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to
“ Uconnect® Settings ” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen
radio, this feature can be programmed through the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, pull the multifunc-
tion lever towards the steering wheel to turn on
the high beams. A high beam symbol will illuminate in
the cluster to indicate the high beams are on. Pull the
multifunction lever a second time to switch the head-
lights back to low beam.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five
times then automatically turn off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel, just below the
radio. Push the switch once to turn the front
fog lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn the
front fog lights off.
Map/Dome/Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
corresponding switch.
Left Switch
• Push the left switch to the left to turn OFF the auto
dome lights. The dome lights will not automatically
turn on when a door is opened.
• Push the left switch to the right to turn ON the dome
lights.
Right Switch
• Push the right switch to the left to turn ON the left
map light.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
• Push the right switch to the right to turn ON the right
map light.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
moved in several positions to access these modes.
Map/Dome Lights
1 — Auto/Off 3 — Left Map
2 — Dome 4 — Right Map
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent
speed.
Low Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second
detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent. The wipers will operate at high speed.
Windshield Wiper Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the
wipers will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate the rear window wiper as follows:
• In intermittent mode when the rear window wiper is
not operating.
• In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the rear
window wiper) when the rear window wiper is oper-
ating.
• In continuous mode with reverse engaged.
With the windshield wipers on and reverse gear engaged,
rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
pushed for more than half a second to activate the rear
window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper
lever will activate the smart washing function, as de-
scribed for the windshield wipers.
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located on the steering column, below the turn
signal lever.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons is located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the ON/OFF
button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CAN button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph
(160 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The speed increment is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides an
audible indication of the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up,
e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense®
System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist is automatically acti-
vated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As
the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle de-
creases, the audible alert becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated
when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed.
ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four ParkSense® Rear Park Assist sensors, located in
the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction,
from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm)
from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in
(60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper,
depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
Rear Park Assist Sensors Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense® Rear
Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the car during the parking maneu-
ver.
ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear
is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-
tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-
sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12
in (30 cm) away.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the
sensors’ field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loud-
speaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that
increases as the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 in
(30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level program-
mable through personal settings in
the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Setup
Menu” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel”.
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on multifunc-
tion display (where provided).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the
distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this
condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is
turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Failure Indications
A malfunction of the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist sen-
sors or system is indicated, during REVERSE gear en-
gagement, by the instrument panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
is displayed on the multifunction display (if
equipped). Refer to “Instrument Cluster De-
scriptions” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display
shall indicate that the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in
failure condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire
system must be disabled. The system is turned off
automatically.
Cleaning The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
Clean the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist sensors with
water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough
or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly
keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at
least 4 in (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke
the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE or when the
Camera Delay is turned OFF on the rear camera settings
menu, the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation
or audio screen appears again.
When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE, with
the delay camera activated ON in the menu screen, the
camera image will continue to be displayed up to 10
seconds after placing the vehicle in the reverse position,
unless the speed of the vehicle is not greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is in PARK position or the
ignition key is in the OFF position.
When the vehicle is in reverse, there is a provided
touchscreen display to turn the camera image off. The
display of the camera image after switching off the
touchscreen display can be enabled or disabled through
the rear camera settings menu.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of
the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER OUTLETS
Passenger Compartment Power Outlets
The cigar lighter and the power socket are located in the
center console, and both operate with the ignition key in
the MAR (ON/RUN) position.
Load Compartment Power Outlet
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on the
left side of the rear cargo compartment. It operates with
the ignition key in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
The outlet can be used for powering 12 Volt adaptive
accessories and recharging communications devices.
Passenger Compartment Power Outlets
Load Compartment Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180W
to the outlet. Using unsuitable adaptors may damage
the outlet.
Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #85 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet 12V
2 — #86 Fuse 30A Green IP Power Outlet 12V
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Interior Fuse Panel Power Outlet Fuse Location
1 — #05 Fuse 15A Blue Second IP Power Outlet 12V
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
Push the cigar lighter button to activate the cigar lighter
when the ignition key is in the MAR position.
After a few seconds the button returns to its initial
position and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
NOTE: Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
itself off.
WARNING!
The cigar lighter becomes very hot. Handle it care-
fully and make sure children don’t touch it: risk of
fire and/or burning.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDER
A cupholder is located in the front and rear of the center
console.
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with
a lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the
emergency key from the key fob, insert emergency key
into glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn
the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the
reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the
instrument panel above the glove compartment.
Overhead Console Storage
There is additional shelf storage above the front sun
visors.
Dash Storage Overhead Console Storage Location
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
To make it easier to secure your load, there are hooks (if
equipped) fixed to the floor.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
(Continued)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Cargo Version)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING! (Continued)
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Cargo Lights
Your vehicle may be equipped with rear cargo lights that
can be set to three different positions (On/Left Position,
Center Position, On/Right Position). Using the interior
light lens, push the lens to the right or left from its center
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position and the lights are always on. Leave the lens in
the center position, and the light is turned on and off
when the doors are opened or closed.
Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped
The cargo compartment light comes on automatically
when the swing doors are opened and turns off when the
doors are closed.
Rear Cargo Light
Cargo Compartment Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The rear window defroster button is located in the
center of the instrument panel, below the radio.
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually
shut the defroster off, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built
specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight
turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the
MOPAR® crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the
rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approxi-
mately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
• If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience in-
terruption of satellite radio reception. For improved
satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear cross-
bar over the satellite radio antenna.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........145
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................146
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....147
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) ..............................159
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System ........163
▫ Trip Computer .......................163
▫ Trip Button ..........................163
▫ Trip Functions .......................164
▫ Values Displayed ......................165
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS ...................166
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................168
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............168
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings.............................168
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS .....................177
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................178
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................178
▫ Radio Operation ......................179
4
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .180
▫ General Information ...................180
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................181
▫ Manual Climate Controls ................181
䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ..........................186
▫ Introducing Uconnect® .................186
▫ Get Started ..........................186
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................188
▫ Radio ..............................189
▫ Media..............................190
▫ Phone..............................191
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................192
▫ Additional Information .................193
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — Upper Dash Storage 13 — Climate Controls
2 — Multifunction Lever (External Lights 8 — Radio 14 — USB Charger/AUX
3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Passenger Air Bag 15 — Driver Air Bag
4— Horn 10 — Lower Dash Storage 16 — Uconnect® Phone Buttons
5— Electronic Speed Control Switches 11 — Glove compartment 17 — Shift Lever
6— Multifunction Lever (Front/Rear Wiper,
Trip Computer)
12 — Switch Bank
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (MPH) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
2. Low Fuel Light
The Low Fuel Light will come on when approximately
2–6 gal (9–11 L) remains in the tank, the light will stay on
and a single chime will sound until fuel is added.
3. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
4. Fuel Door Location Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at
a rapid rate.
6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
7. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling
System Pressure Cap” paragraph.
8. Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if
any of the following conditions occur:
• Air Bag Warning Light Fault, (If the Generic Warning
Light starts flashing have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately)
• Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Parking Sensor Failure
• External Lamp Failure (position, plate, rear fog, turn,
stop, drl, stop start failure)
9. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine con-
dition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause
the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous chime will
occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the four
minutes duration is expired, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
10. Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions
Per Minute (RPM x 1000).
11. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the high beam headlights
are on. Pull the multifunction lever toward you
to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low
beam.
NOTE: If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights or
park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light will
remain illuminated and a chime will sound until lights
have been turned to the off position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
12. Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
If this icon blinks, it indicates that the engine
cranking is inhibited in order to prevent possible
engine damage while starting at low temperatures.
13. Engine Oil Level Warning Light
This warning light appears on the panel when
the engine oil level falls below the minimum
recommended value. Restore the correct engine
oil level or contact your authorized dealer for
service.
14. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is
placed in the 1st position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
15. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to
ON/RUN, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger(s) is unbuckled, a chime will
sound and this light will turn ON. The seat belt reminder
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
16. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
17. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
18. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size or load capacity than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
NOTE: The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a “Low
Tire” message in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC). For further information refer to “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) in “Starting And Operating.”
19. Vehicle Security Light
If during starting, the key code is not correctly
recognized, the Vehicle Security Light comes
on in the instrument panel. In this case, turn
the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is
still locked, try again with the other keys that come with
the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer if you still
cannot start the engine.
If, with the engine running, the warning light flashes, this
means that the system is running a self-test (for example,
a voltage drop).
20. Charging System Light — If Equipped
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the Charging System light
remains on, or comes on while driving, it means that the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your au-
thorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
21. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part
of an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system
which monitors the emissions and engine con-
trol system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
testing, the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for
five seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If
the bulb does not come on during starting, have the
condition investigated promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, ect, may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
22. Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog
lights are on.
23. Odometer/Trip Odometer/Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) Display Area
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
Transmission Gear Range (PRND)
The transmission gear range (P,R,N,D) is displayed.
When operating in Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode,
the actual top gear limit (1,2,3, etc.) is displayed. For
further information on ERS, refer to “Nine-Speed Auto-
matic Transmission” in “Starting And Operating.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
24. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
25. Door Ajar
This telltale turns on when one or more doors
are ajar. The telltale will show which doors are
ajar.
26. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, ease up on the accelerator pedal and
apply as little throttle as possible. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP). (Refer to “Electronic Stability Program”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information).
27. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
28. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
29. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied or that the brake fluid
level is low.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the
problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal
pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure of a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed and the
brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with ABS are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
30. Transmission Fault Indicator
This light will illuminate (together with a mes-
sage in the EVIC and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact your authorized
dealer if the message remains after restarting
the engine.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
31. Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is set.
32. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
instrument panel. The EVIC Menu items consists of the
following:
• Speed Beep
• Trip A Data
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Date
• Autoclose
• Units
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer
• Service
• Daylights
• Exit Menu
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the instru-
ment panel to the right of the steering column:
NOTE: If equipped with Uconnect(R) 5.0/5.0N radio,
some customer programmable features will display and
managed by the Uconnect (R) 5.0/5.0N system. Refer to
the radio supplement for further Uconnect (R) 5.0/5.0N
information.
• MENU Button
Push and HOLD the MENU button for a time longer than
1 second to access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the
MENU button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
EVIC Control Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
Dimmer:
With headlights on and without entering in the menu,
push the UP or DOWN arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the brightness of the instrument panel, graphics
and command buttons.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu
options.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the displayed submenu option and to open the rel-
evant setup menu.
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this
submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main
menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
display in the EVIC display. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times,
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-
tion such as trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed, and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59
(999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-
matically.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
over one second to reset.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than
one second.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new
trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Range
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Trip distance A
• Average Economy A
• Instantaneous Economy
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time)
• Reset Trip A
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Average Economy B
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time)
• Reset Trip B
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip
B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Economy” can-
not be reset. “Reset Trip A” and “Reset Trip B” may be
present.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.).
Trip planning must take into account the above notes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Economy
This value shows the approximate average consumption
since the last reset.
Instantaneous Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the car is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func-
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing
so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect® 5.0N Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock & Date, Safety & Driv-
ing Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup (if
equipped), Restore Settings (if equipped).
NOTE:
• Only one category may be selected at a time.
• The Back arrow will change into a Done button if any
changes are made.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to
return to the previous menu or press the X button on the
touchscreen to return to the Main Settings screen. Press-
ing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
Press the display mode button to set the display bright-
ness according to day, night or auto condition. In auto
mode the display brightness is aligned to that of the
instrument panel.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with
the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Display Brightness With the Headlights Off
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with
the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Set Language
This feature allows you to select one of multiple lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
the desired language button. The button will highlight
showing that setting has been selected. Press the arrow
back/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Units — If Equipped
Press the Units button to select the correct unit for
Temperature (°F or °C), Distance (mi or km) and Fuel
Consumption. If the distance is in mi (miles), miles per
gallon (mpg) are set automatically. If the distance
is km, km/1 or 1/100km can be selected.
• Touchscreen Beep
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound
heard when a button on the touchscreen is pressed. To
make your selection, press the “Touchscreen Beep” but-
ton on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The
button will highlight indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Display Trip B
Press the relevant button to activate/deactivate the dis-
playing of the Trip B on the instrument panel display.
• Voice Response Length
This feature allows you to change the Voice Response
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,
press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchscreen The
button will highlight showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio
set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen. The
button will highlight showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
back button on the faceplate.
• Set Time Hours
This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the ⬙Up⬙ or
⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the
hours up or down. Press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press
the ”X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen.
• Set Time Minutes
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the ⬙Up⬙ or
⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the
minutes up or down. Press the back arrow/Done button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the
Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press
the “Show Time in Status Bar” button. The button will
highlight showing that setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Time and Format
This feature will allow you to set the time and choose the
format to display the time. Press the 12h/24h AM and/or
PM button on the touchscreen. The button will highlight
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
previous menu. If 24h is selected, the AM/PM buttons on
the touchscreen will be greyed out (unavailable).
• Set Date
This feature will allow you to set the date manually. Press
the Set Date button on the touchscreen and using the
“Up” and “Down” arrows, set the date. Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see
straight grid line overlay over the ParkView® Back up
camera display whenever the shift lever is put into
REVERSE and/or the rear hatch is opened. The image
will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
the top of the screen. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE and the rear hatch is closed the rear view
image will display for no more than ten seconds and after
the radio screen will appear.
To make your selection, press the ParkView® Rear Back
Up Camera button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Press the arrow back/Done button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView®
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
cating that the setting has been selected. Press the arrow
back/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto
Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or
“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-
ting has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Lock On
Exit” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or
“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-
ting has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, press
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
the “Flash Headlights With Lock” button on the touch-
screen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Lock” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance settings.
Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust,
or tap the speaker icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “–” or “+” arrow
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the Up and Down arrow buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen. Then
press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen
when done.
• Auto - On Radio
Press the Auto On Radio button on the touchscreen to set
how the radio behaves when the Ignition is switched to
On. The options are: ON, Off or Recall Last. Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen when done.
• AUX Volume Offset
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3
followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen.
• Radio Off Delay
Press the Radio Off Delay to keep the radio On for a
preset amount of time after the Ignition is switched Off.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen
when done.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings
are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to
default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
Uconnect® RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB Input and Auxiliary Jack is located on the
instrument panel below the Climate Controls. This fea-
ture allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supple-
ment Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
USB Input And AUX Jack
1 — USB Input 2 — AUX Audio Jack
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio, AUX or other valid audio
sources.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the phone, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down
or off during mobile phone operation when not using
Uconnect® (if equipped).
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Controls
The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary
dials, and three push buttons.
1. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial
counter clockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating clockwise into the red
area indicates warmer temperatures.
2. A/C Button
Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation
modes at the same time.
Manual Climate Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
3. Recirculation Control
Push this control button to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost. If the recirculation button is pressed in
Defrost mode, the recirculation LED will blink.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
4. Rear Defrost Control
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be ad-
justed to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor
outlets.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
ture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and
side window demister outlets. Use this mode
with maximum blower and temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
6. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
Rear Window/Mirror Defrosting
Push, and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
The activation of the rear defroster is indicated by the
rear defrost warning light on the instrument panel. The
function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated
rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage
that might cause them to stop working properly.
Air Recirculation
Press and release the Air Recirculation button, LED
indicator On, to enter recirculation mode. It is recom-
mended to turn the internal air recirculation On while
standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduc-
tion of polluted air.
Do not use this function for an extended period of time,
particularly if there are many passengers on board, to
prevent the windows from misting up.
NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to
reach the required heating or cooling conditions more
quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the
internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it
would considerably increase the possibility of the win-
dows misting.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Distribution Selection
Rotate the Mode Control knob to manually select one of
the five possible air distribution settings in the passenger
compartment:
Air flow to the front windshield, front side win-
dow and front/rear footwell diffusers.
Air flow to the front/rear footwell diffusers. This
air distribution allows the passenger compart-
ment to be heated quickly.
Air flow distributed between central and side
dashboard vents and front/rear footwell vents.
Air flow to central/side dashboard vents (passen-
ger’s body).
Air flow to windshield and side windows.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield
distribution activates the climate control system com-
pressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation
is set to ⬙outside air⬙ (LED on Recirculation Control
button off). This logic guarantees optimum visibility at
the windows. The user can always set air recirculation
and climate control system compressor.
System Maintenance
In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at
least once a month for about 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at a Ram dealership before the
summer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
system.
Key Features:
• 5.0” Full Color Touchscreen Display
• Bluetooth® With Integrated Voice Control
• GPS Navigation (If Equipped)
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Uconnect® 5.0/5.0N
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect® Voice Command
1 — Push to Mute
2 — Push To Begin Radio or Media functions.
3 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
4 — Push To End Call
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect® 5.0/5.0N
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Sub-
scription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial re-
quired.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect® 5.0/5.0N Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, Bluetooth® and
auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (CD
player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect® 5.0/5.0N Media
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the
name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When
a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect® 5.0/5.0N Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply”
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the
system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be Late.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Okay. Where are you? I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect® System Support:
• DriveUconnect.com
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................199
▫ Automatic Transmission ................199
▫ Normal Starting.......................199
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
−29°C) .............................200
▫ Extended Park Starting..................200
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................201
▫ After Starting ........................201
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .201
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............203
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............204
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .204
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ........204
▫ Gear Ranges .........................207
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........214
▫ Acceleration .........................214
▫ Traction ............................214
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............215
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................215
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................215
5
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................216
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............217
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................218
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................221
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .221
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .221
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............223
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............223
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................224
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........225
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ................226
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........229
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............230
▫ Tire Markings ........................230
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........234
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........235
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........237
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........242
▫ Tire Pressure ........................242
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................243
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .245
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................245
▫ Tire Types ...........................246
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............248
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............248
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Spinning ........................251
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................251
▫ Life Of Tire .........................252
▫ Replacement Tires .....................253
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......254
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....255
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ..............................256
▫ Base System .........................258
▫ General Information ...................261
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................262
▫ 2.4L Engine ..........................262
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................262
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............263
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......263
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................264
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................264
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................265
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............266
䡵 Adding Fuel ..........................266
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................268
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............269
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................271
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............271
▫ Towing Tips .........................283
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than -31°F (-35° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. The message
“plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster when the ambient temperature is below
-25°F (-32° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driv-
er’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the full
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the full
LOCK/OFF position, and once removed the transmission
is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/
RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC). To select a gear range, press the
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rear-
ward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to
shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section).
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles or kilometers.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation⬙ in this section for further information). Mov-
ing the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the
DRIVE position) activates ERS mode and prevents auto-
matic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling
the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the
highest available gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear
limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Shift Lever
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector/shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds),
use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer
to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear
range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-
age due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may operate differently until the trans-
mission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles
(2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the
transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears.
Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside
DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear
in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift lever
forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the top available
gear and it will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the
DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever into
the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward
(-). The transmission will shift to the range from which
the vehicle can best be slowed down.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-
VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Con-
trol System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide en-
hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions simi-
lar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill
is in REVERSE gear).
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi-
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR
(ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional informa-
tion.
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illu-
minate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
“ESC OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-
tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
ESC Off Switch
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
WARNING! (Continued)
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to
have your sensor function checked.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Five Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and a proper text message will be displayed
when one or more of the four active road tire pressures
are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your
vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
a proper text message will be displayed. If the ignition
key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the
system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no
longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the
following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle can be equipped with either Tire
Service Kit, compact spare tire or regular size spare tire
(with or without original TPMS sensor).
1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if equipped):
After fixing the punctured tire with original tire seal-
ant, the original situation will be restored, so system
will turn off the telltale during the normal drive.
2. Compact Spare Tire – if equipped: The compact spare
wheel is not equipped with TPMS sensor. So when
mounted, during the normal drive the system will
turn on the telltale (flashing for approximately 75 sec.
then remains solid). This condition persists until a
wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor has been
mounted on the vehicle.
3. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with TPMS
sensor): When mounted, during the normal drive the
system will turn on the telltale (flashing for approxi-
mately 75 sec. then remains solid). This condition
persists until a wheel equipped with original TPMS
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
sensor has been mounted on the vehicle. Then the
system will be restored and the telltale will turn off
during the normal drive.
4. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS sensor):
When mounted, the telltale will turn off during the
normal drive.
5. In all the above cases please check the replacement tire
inflation pressure before driving your vehicle.
6. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is driven for
short periods of time, then the system can take a while
to be restored.
NOTE: For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior,
please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off during each
tire substitution.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded “Regular” gaso-
line having a posted octane number of 87
as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% ethanol (E-10). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 10% ethanol (E-10).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 10% ethanol (E-10) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con-
tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-
mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
Adding Fuel
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close
fuel filler door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on,
due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your
vehicle.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
Trailer Electrical Connector Location
1 — Four-Pin Connector Location
2 — Seven-Pin Connector Location
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
• When using the ERS shift control, select the highest
gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids
frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear range or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis-
sion in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........289
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............289
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................290
▫ Torque Specifications ...................291
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........292
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped ......293
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage ..................293
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................297
▫ Jack Location.........................298
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ................298
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................302
▫ Jacking Instructions ....................302
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers.......311
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........313
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............313
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................315
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............316
䡵 TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED..........318
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed while maintaining the motion of the vehicle
with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 65 mph (106 km/h).
Torque Patterns
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger seat.
Tire Service Kit Usage
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency
repair using the Tire Service Kit located under the
passenger seat.
Tire punctures of up to 1/4” (6 mm) can be repaired; the
kit can be used in all weather conditions. Do not remove
the foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or
nail.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw
the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Power Plug (located behind storage door)
4 — Power Button
5 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet
socket. Start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position.
The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air
will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached
turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle
30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the
sealant inside the tire.
Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving
the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If
the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest
Authorized Dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph
(110 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an Authorized Dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the
inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
continue driving.
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that a tire has
been treated with Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-
tion date at your Authorized Dealer.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,
away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this
WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture
and serious injury or death.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297
Jack Location
The jack and tools are stowed under the drivers front seat.
Removing The Spare Tire
1.
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. Attach the wrench handle to the winch extension.
Jack/Tools Location
Jack Tools
1 — Wrench Handle
2—TowEye
3 — Winch extension
4 — Emergency Screwdriver
5 — Bolt Install Wrench
6 — Wheel Chock
7 — Jack
298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. To access the winch mechanism open the rear doors of
the vehicle to expose the winch mechanism access
cover. Remove the access cover and install the winch
extension into the winch mechanism.
3. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise
until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the winch extension only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Winch Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
5. Remove the retainer nut prior to removing the retainer
from the wheel.
Spare Tire Retainer Nut
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Lifting Spare Tire
Retainer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang-
ing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain
in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug bolts with
the wrench handle by turning them to the left one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body.
Jack Warning Label Jacking Locations
304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Place the jack underneath the jack engagement
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Jack Engaged To Body Flange
Front Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged in the described loca-
tion. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is securely engaged.
Rear Jacking Location
306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right
until the tire just clears the surface and enough clear-
ance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire
lift provides maximum stability.
Front Jacking Location Engaged Rear Jacking Location Engaged
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5.
Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel lug
bolts using the bolt install wrench.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug bolt torque.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
10. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle.
NOTE: For vehicles with alloy wheels remove the
adapter bracket and bolts from the storage bag in the
glove compartment. Take the adapter and fit the plastic
spacer between the spring and the flange of the bracket.
The plastic fin must be directed downwards and per-
fectly coincide with the flange cut part; fit the bracket in
the adapter, fit the pin in the hole and fasten by the knob.
Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted adapter
on the inner part of the rim, using the supplied bolts
fasten the wheel to the adapter using the bolt install
wrench. Tighten the bolts with the wrench handle. Rotate
the winch mechanism clockwise until the wheel is prop-
erly stowed under the vehicle. This is for temporary use
only.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309
Adapter/Spacer
1 — Adapter
2 — Plastic Spacer
Adapter/Bracket
1 — Adapter
2 — Bracket
3—Pin
310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Stow the jack and tools under the drivers seat.
12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure, as required.
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel.
Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
Alloy Wheel Mounting
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while holding at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Bolt
312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice.
Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
correct wheel bolt torque.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the shift
lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE , while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only
be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than 2 seconds, you must push the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting And Operating”. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to
restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be used
to tow a disabled vehicle.
When using a tow eye be sure to follow the “Tow Eye
Usage Precautions” and the “Towing A Disabled Vehicle”
instructions in this section.
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tow eye is properly seated and secure
in the mounting receptacle.
Tow Eye
318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• The tow eye is recommended for use with an approved
tow bar and or rope.
• Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle onto a
flatbed truck.
• Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to
“Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in this section for further
information.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes.
• Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may
break, causing serious injury or death.
• Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps
may break or become disengaged, causing serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause
components to break resulting in serious injury or
death.
Tow Eye Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319
CAUTION!
• The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside
assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an
appropriate device in accordance with the highway
code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for
a short distance to the nearest service location.
• Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles off
the road or where there are obstacles.
•
In compliance with the above conditions, towing with
a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one
towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible
along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle
may occur if these guidelines are not followed.
Front Tow Eye Installation
The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a door,
located on the right front bumper fascia. To install the
tow eye, open the door using the vehicle key or a small
screwdriver, and thread the tow eye into the receptacle.
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the eye and
tighten, refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” for further
information. The tow eye must be fully seated to the
attaching bracket through the lower front fascia as
shown. If the tow eye is not fully seated to the attaching
bracket, the vehicle should not be towed.
Rear Tow Eye Installation
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a door on
the rear bumper fascia.
To install the tow eye, open the door using the vehicle
key or a small screwdriver, and thread the tow eye into
the receptacle.
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the eye and
tighten, refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” for further
information. The tow eye must be fully seated to the
attaching bracket through the lower rear fascia. If the tow
eye is not fully seated to the attaching bracket, the vehicle
should not be towed.
320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery
is discharged, refer to “SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE” in
this section for instructions on shifting the transmission
out of PARK for towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the shift lever boot from the center console.
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the shift lever override access hole (at the right front
corner of the shift lever assembly) then push and hold
the override release lever down.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.
Shift Lever Boot Location Shift Lever Override Access Hole
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. To remove the key manually,
proceed as follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in
the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the
cargo box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping
control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of
the travel position, then lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle up until fully en-
gaged.
5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column
cover screws, and remove the lower cover.
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and
with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards.
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column
cover.
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact your Authorized Dealer to
have the reinstall procedure carried out. If you would
like to proceed in performing the reinstall procedure
special attention must be paid to the correct coupling
of the clips. Otherwise damage to the cover or noise
might be heard due to incorrect fastening of the
lower cover.
Release Tab Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........329
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .330
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............330
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................331
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................333
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................333
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........333
▫ Engine Oil ..........................334
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................337
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................337
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............338
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............339
▫ Body Lubrication .....................340
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............341
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................342
▫ Exhaust System ......................343
▫ Cooling System ......................345
▫ Brake System ........................351
▫ Power Steering Fluid ...................353
7
▫ Automatic Transmission ................354
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................356
䡵 FUSES ..............................363
▫ Underhood Fuses......................364
▫ Interior Fuses ........................368
▫ Central Unit Fuse Panel .................371
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................372
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................373
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................374
▫ Headlamps ..........................374
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamps ................375
▫ Parking And Daytime Running Lights .......375
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps............375
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps .............................376
▫ Third Brake Light (Center Mount) ..........376
▫ License Plate Lights ....................377
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................377
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................378
▫ Engine .............................378
▫ Chassis ............................380
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check fuel cap” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight-
ened.
Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If
the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE or crosshatch zone
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
on the dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the
reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a
reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
(Continued)
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
Wiper Service Position
If it is necessary to lift the blade from the windshield (In
the event of snow or blade replacement) Proceed as
directed:
1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the OFF
position.
2. Turn the ignition to the MAR-ON position then to
STOP.
3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within two
minutes move the right stalk upward, into the un-
stable (“anti-panic”) position, for at least half of a
second. The windshield wiper then executes part of a
stroke; at each command, approximately 1/3 of a
normal wiper stroke is triggered.
NOTE: The previous operation can be repeated up to
three times. In order to move the blades to the most
suitable position.
4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed with
the required operation.
5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in contact
with the windshield.
6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position, turning the
ignition to MAR-ON.
NOTE: Do not operate the screen wiper with the blades
lifted from the windshield.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when
the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F
(−37° C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
The image on the coolant system pres-
sure cap is a reminder that the radiator
contains hot engine coolant under
pressure.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
(Continued)
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Power Steering Fluid
Check the fluid level with the vehicle on flat ground and
engine cold. Fluid should be between MIN and MAX
references on the reservoir body.
The level may go over the MAX line when oil is hot.
If topping off is required, make sure the oil you use is
approved. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts” in the section for further information.
WARNING!
Because it is flammable, do not allow the power
steering fluid to come into contact with hot engine
parts
NOTE: Power steering fluid consumption is very low. If
you need to top off your fluid often and multiple times
have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR®
Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with
MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not
use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total
Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is
not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, remove fasteners and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Front Distribution Unit
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue Body Controller
F02 40 Amp Orange Front Heated Seats, Second 12 Volt IP
Outlet
F02 60 Amp Blue Rear Power Window Including Front
Heated Seats, Second 12 Volt IP Outlet
F03 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange BSM System Module
F05 50 Amp Red Available
F06 20 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange Blower Motor
F09 10 Amp Red Available
F10 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 10 Amp Red Secondary Loads ECM
F14 15 Amp Blue High Beam
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F15 15 Amp Blue Available
F16 5 Amp Tan ECM and Transmission Shifter
F17 25 Amp Clear ECM Power Loads
F18 5 Amp Tan ECM Load, Main Relay
F19 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster
F21 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock
F22 10 Amp Red Primary ECM Loads
F23 20 Amp Yellow BSM System
F24 5 Amp Tan BSM System, Positive Key and Steering
Angle Sensor
F30 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamp
F81 – Available
F82 20 Amp Yellow Available
F83 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F84 15 Amp Blue AT Module
F85 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V
F86 15 Amp Blue IP Power Outlet 12V
F87 5 Amp Tan IBS
F88 7.5 Amp Brown External Mirror Defrost
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel Cover
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F53 5 Amp Beige KL 30 (+30) - IPC
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Doors Locking
F36 10 Amp Red KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC,
Radio
F43 15 Amp Blue Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Windows
F50 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror Adjustment
Command, HVAC, RVC, HWB Coils
F37 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch
(N.O.), IPC, Brake Pedal Switch (N.C.)
F49 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, ECM
Backlighting, TTM
F31 5 Amp Beige KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Windows
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Central Unit Fuse Panel
The central power fuse panel is located on the driver’s
side under the instrument panel.
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Driver
Fuse Panel Cover
Fuse Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F2 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Passenger
F3 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Driver side
F4 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Passenger side
F5 15 Amp Blue 2nd Instrument Panel Power Outlet 12V
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Lamps C10W
Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W
Luggage Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low Beam Headlamp H11
Front High Beam Headlamps HB3
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Rear Stop Lamp P21W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
Bulb Number
Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)
Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W
Reverse Light W16W
Front Fog Lamps H11
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Front
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer upper
headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
4. Reinstall the plastic cap
Parking And Daytime Running Lights
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer lower
headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place
4. Reinstall the plastic cap
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not
serviced separately. See your authorized dealer for re-
placement of these lights.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
The rear light clusters contain taillight, brake light,
direction indicator and reverse/rear fog light bulbs. To
access the light clusters, proceed as follows:
1. Open the rear doors. or liftgate
2. Remove the screws and remove the tail lamp assem-
bly.
3. Remove the screws and separate the backplate from
the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows:
Third Brake Light (Center Mount)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two fastening
screws and extract the cluster.
2. For versions with swing doors, remove rubber plugs ,
remove retaining tabs and extract the cluster.
3. For versions with high roof and swing doors, remove
the pressure-fit plastic guard and rubber cap using a
screwdriver, release the retaining tags as shown in the
figure and remove the unit.
4. Remove the appropriate tabs and remove the bulb
holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Plate Lights
Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:
1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove the lens by
lifting to the left.
2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from the side
contacts; insert the new bulbs and make sure they are
correctly clamped between these contacts.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Mate-
rial Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic
Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 4.
Power Steering Reservoir Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting
FCA US Material Standard MS-11655.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extended engine
idle time, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures
will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”
in “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 350 hours of engine
run time or twelve months, whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
382 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses,
lines and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 383
Maintenance Chart
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. * X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
384 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change brake fluid every two years. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs – 2.4L Engine. ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
* Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
if operated in dusty and off road environment.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
(Continued)
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 385
WARNING! (Continued)
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
386 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................389
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............389
▫ Prepare A List ........................389
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............389
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............389
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center ...........390
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........390
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................391
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................391
▫ Service Contract ......................391
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............392
䡵 MOPAR®PARTS.......................393
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............393
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................393
▫ In Canada...........................393
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............394
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 389
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
390 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 391
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
392 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 393
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
394 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 395
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
396 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............347
Additives, Fuel ...........................264
Airbag...............................44, 45
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag .................45, 46
Air Bag Components .....................44
Air bag Operation .......................47
Air Bag Warning Light ....................55
Enhanced Accident Response ................55
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................58
FrontAirBag ........................44, 45
If A Deployment Occurs ...................53
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................48
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............57
Transporting Pets ........................84
Air bag Deployment ........................44
Air bag Light .......................55, 87, 147
Air bag Maintenance........................57
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .337
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................339
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............339, 340
Air Conditioning System ....................339
Air Filter ...............................337
Air Pressure, Tires.........................243
Air Recirculation..........................184
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................16
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................16
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............347, 377
Disposal ..............................349
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................221
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................147
Appearance Care .........................356
Ashtray ................................134
Audio Systems (Radio) .....................177
Auto Down Power Windows ..................26
Automatic Transaxle.....................12, 199
Automatic Transmission ..............203, 204, 355
398 INDEX
Adding Fluid .......................355, 380
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................355
Fluid Change ..........................355
Fluid Level Check ...................354, 355
Fluid Type .........................354, 380
Special Additives .......................354
Auto Up Power Windows ....................26
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........131
Axle Lubrication ..........................380
Battery.................................338
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........19
Belts, Seat ...............................87
Body Builders Guide ........................6
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................340
B-Pillar Location ..........................237
Brake Assist System .......................223
Brake Fluid .............................380
Brake, Parking ...........................218
Brake System .........................221, 351
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................221
Fluid Check ........................352, 380
Master Cylinder ........................352
Parking ..............................218
Warning Light .........................147
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................204
Bulb Replacement......................373, 374
Bulbs, Light...........................89, 373
Camera, Rear ............................128
Capacities, Fluid ..........................377
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................266
Oil (Engine) ........................329, 336
Power Steering .........................217
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................349
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................86, 266
Cargo Tie-Downs .........................137
10
INDEX 399
Car Washes .............................356
Cellular Phone ...........................180
Certification Label.........................269
Chains, Tire .............................254
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................231
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ............................147, 331
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............85
Checks, Safety ............................85
Child Restraint ............................59
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................64
Child Restraints .........................59
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........73
Infants And Child Restraints ................62
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........62
Cigar Lighter ............................134
Clean Air Gasoline ........................262
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................358
Climate Control ..........................181
Manual ..............................181
Cold Weather Operation ....................200
Compact Spare Tire ........................249
Contract, Service ..........................391
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........349
Cooling System...........................345
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............347
Coolant Capacity .......................377
Coolant Level ..........................350
Disposal of Used Coolant .................349
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................346
Inspection .........................346, 350
Points to Remember .....................350
Pressure Cap ..........................349
Radiator Cap ..........................349
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......347, 377, 378
400 INDEX
Corrosion Protection .......................356
Cruise Light .............................147
Cupholders .............................135
Customer Assistance .......................389
Customer Programmable Features .............166
Data Recorder, Event .......................58
Daytime Running Lights ....................111
Dealer Service............................333
Defroster, Rear Window.....................140
Defroster, Windshield ....................87, 183
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................330
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................334
Power Steering .........................217
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................321
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................349
Door Locks ..............................20
Doors ..................................20
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ................................215
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........131
Electric Rear Window Defrost.................140
Electric Remote Mirrors......................96
Electronic Brake Control System ...............221
Brake Assist System .....................223
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .................212
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............229
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........118
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............225
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Exit Trip ..............................164
NewTrip.............................164
Start Of Trip Procedure ...................164
Trip Computer .........................163
10
INDEX 401
Trip Functions .........................164
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................316
Jump Starting ..........................313
Towing ..............................321
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........331
Engine .................................329
Air Cleaner ...........................337
Block Heater ..........................201
Break-In Recommendations .................84
Checking Oil Level ......................334
Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................378
Cooling ..............................345
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................86, 266
Fails to Start ...........................201
Flooded, Starting .......................201
Fuel Requirements ......................262
Jump Starting ..........................313
Oil...........................334, 377, 378
Oil Filler Cap .......................329, 336
Oil Filter .............................337
Oil Selection .......................335, 377
Oil Synthetic ..........................336
Overheating ...........................289
Starting ..............................199
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................336
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................336
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............55
Ethanol ................................263
Event Data Recorder ........................58
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................86, 266
Exhaust System ........................86, 343
Exterior Lights ............................89
Fabric Care..............................360
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................337
Engine Oil .........................337, 378
402 INDEX
Engine Oil Disposal .....................336
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................289
Turn Signal .........................89, 147
Flash-To-Pass ............................112
Flooded Engine Starting ....................201
Fluid, Brake .............................380
Fluid Capacities ..........................377
Fluid Leaks ..............................89
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ................................352
Engine Oil ............................334
Power Steering .........................217
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........378
Fog Lights ...........................113,147
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................289
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................316
Fuel...................................262
Additives .............................264
Clean Air .............................262
Ethanol ..............................263
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................266
Gasoline ..............................262
Gauge ...............................147
Materials Added ........................264
Methanol .............................263
Octane Rating ......................262, 378
Requirements ..........................262
Specifications ..........................378
Tank Capacity ..........................377
Fuses ..................................363
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ................266, 330
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................262
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................262
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................262
Gauges
Fuel .................................147
10
INDEX 403
Speedometer ..........................147
Tachometer ............................147
Gear Ranges .............................207
Gear Select Lever Override ..................322
General Information ....................180, 261
Glass Cleaning ...........................361
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................269, 272
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..............269, 271
Guide, Body Builders ........................6
GVWR .................................269
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................215
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................289
Headlights ..............................111
Cleaning .............................361
Passing ..............................112
Head Restraints ..........................103
Heated Mirrors ...........................140
Heated Seats.............................102
Heater, Engine Block .......................201
Hill Start Assist...........................224
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................274
Holder, Cup .............................135
Hood Release ............................107
Ignition .................................12
Key..................................12
Ignition Key Removal .......................12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................14
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................94
Instrument Cluster .....................146, 147
Instrument Panel and Controls ................145
Instrument Panel Cover .....................360
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............362
Interior Appearance Care....................360
404 INDEX
Introduction ..............................4
iPod® Control ...........................178
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control ...................178
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio ...............178
Jump Starting ............................313
Key-In Reminder ..........................14
Key, Replacement ..........................15
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................14
Lane Change Assist ........................112
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................34
Latches .................................89
Lead Free Gasoline ........................262
Leaks, Fluid ..............................89
Life of Tires .............................252
Light Bulbs ...........................89, 373
Lights ............................89, 110, 111
Airbag ..........................55, 87, 147
Anti-Lock .............................147
Brake Assist Warning ....................226
Brake Warning .........................147
Bulb Replacement .......................374
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) .........147
Cruise ...............................147
Exterior ...............................89
Fog .................................147
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................289
High Beam ............................147
High Beam Indicator .....................147
Instrument Cluster ......................147
Oil Pressure ...........................147
Park .................................112
Passing ..............................112
Seat Belt Reminder ......................147
Service ...............................374
10
INDEX 405
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............147
Traction Control ........................226
Turn Signal ............................89
Wait to Start ...........................147
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......147
Loading Vehicle .......................268, 271
Capacities ............................271
Tires ................................237
Locks ..................................20
Door .................................20
Lubrication, Body .........................340
Lug Nuts ...............................290
Maintenance Free Battery....................338
Maintenance Procedures ....................333
Maintenance Schedule ......................382
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......331
Manual, Service ..........................394
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................352
Methanol ...............................263
Mirrors .................................94
Electric Powered .........................96
Electric Remote .........................96
Exterior Folding .........................95
Outside ...............................94
Rearview ..............................94
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................256
MOPAR® Parts .......................333, 393
MTBE/ETBE ............................263
Multi-Function Control Lever .................111
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................84
Occupant Restraints ........................31
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............262, 378
Oil Change Indicator .......................163
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................163
406 INDEX
Oil, Engine ..........................334, 378
Capacity .............................377
Change Interval ........................335
Checking .............................334
Dipstick ..............................334
Disposal ..............................336
Filter .............................337, 378
Filter Disposal .........................336
Identification Logo ......................335
Materials Added to ......................336
Recommendation ....................335, 377
Synthetic .............................336
Viscosity ..........................336, 377
Oil Filter, Change .........................337
Oil Filter, Selection ........................337
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................330
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................94
Overheating, Engine .......................289
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,394
Paint Care ..............................356
Parking Brake............................218
ParkSense® System, Rear....................122
Passing Light ............................112
Personal Settings..........................166
Pets....................................84
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........238
Power
Mirrors ...............................96
Steering ...........................216, 217
Windows ..............................25
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................41
Preparation for Jacking .....................302
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................41
Radial Ply Tires ..........................245
10
INDEX 407
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........349
Radio Operation ..........................180
Rear Camera ............................128
Rear ParkSense System .....................122
Rear Window Defroster .....................184
Recorder, Event Data .......................58
Recreational Towing .......................284
Reformulated Gasoline .....................262
Refrigerant ..............................340
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................33
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
FCC General Information ..................20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........178
Replacement Bulbs ........................373
Replacement Keys .........................15
Replacement Parts.........................333
Replacement Tires .........................253
Reporting Safety Defects ....................393
Restraint, Head...........................103
Restraints, Child...........................59
Restraints, Occupant ........................31
Rotation, Tires ...........................255
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................87
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................89
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................393
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................86
Safety Information, Tire .....................230
Safety Tips ...............................85
Schedule, Maintenance .....................382
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......39
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........41
Energy Management Feature ................41
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................37
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................34
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............39
Pregnant Women ........................41
408 INDEX
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................41
Seat Belt Reminder .......................33
Seat Belt System .........................31
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................362
Seat Belt Reminder .........................33
Seat Belts .............................33, 87
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................39
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........39
Child Restraint ..........................59
Front Seat ........................33, 34, 37
Inspection .............................87
Operating Instructions ....................37
Pregnant Women ........................41
Pretensioners ...........................41
Rear Seat ..............................34
Reminder .............................147
Untwisting Procedure .....................39
Seats ...................................98
Adjustment ............................98
Heated ...............................102
Security Alarm ............................16
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)...............378
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................15
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................14
Service Assistance .........................389
Service Contract ..........................391
Service Manuals ..........................394
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ..................204
Shift Lever Override .......................322
Shoulder Belts ............................34
Signals, Turn ..........................89, 147
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................254
Snow Tires ..............................247
Spare Tire ...........................249, 250
Spark Plugs .............................378
10
INDEX 409
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .........................378
Oil..................................378
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................118
Speedometer.............................147
Starting ................................199
Automatic Transmission ..................199
Cold Weather ..........................200
Engine Fails to Start .....................201
Steering
Power ............................216, 217
Tilt Column ...........................117
Wheel, Tilt ............................117
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............178
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .178
Storage ................................372
Storage, Vehicle...........................372
Storing Your Vehicle .......................372
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........45
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................336
Tachometer..............................147
Telescoping Steering Column .................117
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................137
Tilt Steering Column .......................117
Tire and Loading Information Placard .......237, 238
Tire Markings ............................230
Tires.............................89, 242, 395
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................252
Air Pressure ...........................242
Chains ...............................254
Compact Spare .........................249
General Information .....................242
High Speed ...........................245
Inflation Pressures .......................243
Life of Tires ...........................252
Load Capacity ......................237, 239
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............256
410 INDEX
Pressure Warning Light ...................147
Quality Grading ........................395
Radial ...............................245
Replacement ...........................253
Rotation ..............................255
Safety ............................230, 242
Sizes ................................231
Snow Tires ............................247
Spinning .............................251
Trailer Towing .........................279
Tread Wear Indicators ....................251
Tire Safety Information .....................230
Tire Service Kit ...........................292
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................276
Towing ................................271
Disabled Vehicle ........................321
Guide ...............................276
Recreational ...........................284
Weight ...............................276
Towing Eyes.............................318
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome ...........284
Traction ................................214
Traction Control ..........................223
Trailer Towing ...........................271
Cooling System Tips .....................284
Hitches ..............................274
Minimum Requirements ..................277
Tips.................................283
Trailer and Tongue Weight .................276
Wiring ...............................281
Trailer Towing Guide.......................276
Trailer Weight............................276
Transaxle
Automatic ..........................12, 199
Transmission ............................204
Automatic ......................203,
204, 354
Maintenance ...........................354
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .19
10
INDEX 411
Transporting Pets ..........................84
Tread Wear Indicators ......................251
Turn Signals .............................147
Uconnect® Voice Command..................186
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................395
Unleaded Gasoline ........................262
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................39
Upholstery Care ..........................360
Vehicle Certification Label ...................269
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ....................239, 268, 271
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Storage ...........................372
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................336
Voice Recognition System (VR) ................186
Wait to Start Light.........................147
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .147
Warnings and Cautions.......................6
Warranty Information ......................392
Washers, Windshield....................114,342
Washing Vehicle ..........................356
Water
Driving Through ........................215
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................358
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................358
Wind Buffeting............................27
Windows ................................25
Power ................................25
Windshield Defroster ....................87, 183
Windshield Washers ....................114,342
Fluid ................................342
Windshield Wiper Blades....................341
Windshield Wipers ........................114
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................341
Wrecker Towing ..........................321
412 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
ProMaster City
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 ProMaster City
15VM-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
